2010 Dodge Caliber Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2010-caliber

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 484 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Caliber
OWNER’S MANUAL
2010
Information Provided by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 91
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................185
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................289
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 371
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................389
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................437
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 455
10
INDEX
...................................................................465
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵Introduction ........................... 4
䡵How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵Warnings And Cautions ................... 6
䡵Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7
1
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫Locking Doors With A Key .............. 14
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 14
䡵Sentry Key威.......................... 14
▫Replacement Keys ..................... 15
▫Customer Key Programming ............. 16
▫General Information ................... 17
䡵Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 17
▫To Set The Security Alarm ............... 18
▫To Disarm The System ................. 18
▫Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override ..... 18
䡵Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 18
▫To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 19
▫Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First
Press .............................. 19
▫Illuminated Approach — If Equipped ....... 20
▫To Lock The Doors And Liftgate .......... 21
2
Information Provided by:
▫Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock ........ 21
▫Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . 22
▫Using The Panic Alarm ................. 22
▫Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 23
▫General Information ................... 23
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 24
䡵Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 25
▫How To Use Remote Start ............... 25
䡵Door Locks ........................... 27
▫Manual Door Locks ................... 27
▫Power Door Locks .................... 28
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) — If Equipped .................. 31
䡵Power Windows — If Equipped ............ 33
▫Power Window Switches ................ 33
▫Auto-Down ......................... 34
▫Window Lockout Switch ................ 35
䡵Liftgate ............................. 35
䡵Occupant Restraints ..................... 37
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 39
▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 44
▫Lap/ Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
With A Mini-Latch And Buckle ............ 45
▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 48
▫Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped ....................... 48
▫Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 49
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 50
▫Energy Management Feature ............. 50
▫Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 51
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 55
▫Seat Belt Extender ..................... 56
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 56
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbags ............................ 57
▫Advanced Front Airbag Features .......... 59
▫Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 64
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 72
▫Child Restraints ...................... 74
䡵Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 84
䡵Safety Tips ........................... 85
▫Transporting Passengers ................ 85
▫Exhaust Gas ......................... 86
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 87
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 89
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Information Provided by:
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a
safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-
porarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,
rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK 3 — ON
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a
signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not lock and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Information Provided by:
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The new Sentry Key威is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audio and visual signals. The horn will
sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance
is still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,
ignition) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail
lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Information Provided by:
To Set The Security Alarm
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and close all doors.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This
shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During
this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is
turned ON, or the power door locks are unlocked in any
manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically
disarm. After approximately 16 seconds, the Vehicle
Security Light will flash slowly. This shows that the
Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.
To Disarm The System
Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key
into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Three Button RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Information Provided by:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re-
moved.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Information Provided by:
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威“Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Information Provided by:
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See “www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
Separating Case Halves
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Information Provided by:
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•
The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•
Any engine warning lamps come on
•
The hood is opened
•
The hazard switch is pressed
•
The transmission is moved out of PARK
•
The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Plunger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave unattended children in the vehicle or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,
the power door lock switch will not operate when the key
is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the key.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Driver Power Door Lock Switch
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Information Provided by:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch
to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
•
If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
•
Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance
with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver’s door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
•
If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
•
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
— If Equipped
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Information Provided by:
To engage or disengage the Child-Protection Door
Lock system
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
the window and open the door with the outside door
handle.
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows. There are single window
controls on each passenger door trim panel, which oper-
ate the passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Open-
ing either front door will cancel this feature.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Information Provided by:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 min-
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
Power Window Switch Location
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window con-
trols, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start your vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn it to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors. The central locking/
unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated
from the liftgate key cylinder.
Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Information Provided by:
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
NOTE:
•
In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE
transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn it to the right (manual
lock models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the
liftgate open with one fluid motion.
•
Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,
the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a
snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in
the event of an electrical system malfunction.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)
Liftgate Handle
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
•
Supplemental driver side knee airbag
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if
equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Information Provided by:
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out the Latch Plate
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Positioning Lap Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Information Provided by:
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seat, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchor-
age, try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in
position. In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat
to position the belt away from your neck.
Adjustable Anchorage
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lap/ Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions With A
Mini-Latch And Buckle
A three point seatbelt with a mini-latch and buckle,
allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor
when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder
belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side
trim panel for added convenience.
1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Information Provided by:
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-
latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Routing the Rear Center Shoulder Belt
Connecting Mini-Latch to Buckle
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Information Provided by:
10. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in
the rear seat.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Left Center Right
First Row ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
Third Row
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Information Provided by:
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Information Provided by:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha-
nism
AHR In Reset Position
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威will con-
tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威Programming
BeltAlert威can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by performing the following procedure:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at
least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat
belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat
belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Information Provided by:
BeltAlert威can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air-
bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a driver side
knee airbag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column.
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
Airbag and Knee Bolster Location
1 — Driver and Passenger Air-
bags 3 — Knee Bolster
2 — Driver Knee Airbag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Information Provided by:
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver,
front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The
SABIC are located above the side windows. The trim
covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG. This
vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Airbags (SAB). If the vehicle is equipped
with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags they are
marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side
of the front seats.
NOTE:
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Airbag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) —
If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide en-
hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air-
bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out-
board side of the front seats.
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Label
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC airbags deploy
downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Information Provided by:
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain airbag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag
The supplemental driver side knee airbag provides en-
hanced protection and works together with the advanced
driver side frontal airbag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
passenger side front passenger by positioning the pas-
senger for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the driver side knee airbag and the
passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protec-
tion for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags also
work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Airbags room to inflate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Information Provided by:
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the
side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be-
tween you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air-
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Airbag, SABIC airbags, Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Airbags — if equipped, and front seat
belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required, depending
on the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags and knee airbag are designed to
provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the sever-
ity and type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, or side
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags and knee airbag will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, Advanced Front Airbags may deploy
in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON position. If the key is in the OFF position,
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Information Provided by:
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Differ-
ent airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag Inflator
Unit
The driver side knee airbag unit is located in the instru-
ment panel trim beneath the steering column. When the
ORC detects a collision requiring the airbag, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is gener-
ated to inflate the knee airbag. The trim cover separates
and folds out of the way allowing the airbag to inflate to
the full size. The airbag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds. The knee airbag gas is vented through
small vent holes in the side of airbag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Inflator
Units — If Equipped
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The side
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Information Provided by:
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Information Provided by:
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Re-
straint Controller System serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with airbag system electrical components. While the
airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any
of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer ser-
vice the airbag system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON position.
•
The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Vehicle speed
•
Engine RPM
•
Brake switch status
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Information Provided by:
•
Pedal position
•
And other parameters depending on vehicle
configuration
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
Refer to ⬙LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)⬙.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
younger than one year old. Both types of child re-
straints are held in the vehicle by the lap/ shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
Refer to the “LATCH – Child Seat Anchorage System
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this
section.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Information Provided by:
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information.
http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Older Children and Child Restraints
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to ⬙LATCH —
Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren)⬙.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Information Provided by:
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
WARNING!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
All three rear seating positions are capable of accommo-
dating LATCH-compatible child seats.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be in-
stalled in the outboard positions only. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seat-
ing positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must
use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your
child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only
install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to “Installing the Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
You should NEVER install LATCH-compatible child
seats so that two seats share a common anchorage. If
installing seats in adjacent seating positions, or if your
child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the
restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Information Provided by:
Installing the LATCH – Compatible child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The lower anchorages are round bars, part of
the seat and body structure, and are readily
visible. In addition, there are tether strap an-
chorages behind each rear seating position,
located in the rear surface of the seat back.
These are round bars, located at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seat back, and just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the surfaces
The lower strap hooks are passed over the top of each
bar, pushing aside the seat cover material
Many, but not all restraint systems will be
equipped with separate straps on each side,
with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
Do not install child restraints using the LATCH system in
all three rear seating positions at the same time. You may
install three child restraints at the same time using the
LATCH system in the outboard seating positions and the
vehicle seat belt in the center position. Always use the top
tether, both with the vehicle seat belt or the lower
anchors.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
First loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hook or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the
lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover
material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage
directly behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint, being careful to route the tether strap to provide
the most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint, routing it over the head restraint. Finally,
tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove the
slack in the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
play with them. In addition, never leave unattended
children in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Information Provided by:
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Seat
Belts in Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart
below defines the seating positions with an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
Left Center Right
CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
Third Row
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
•
Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
routing it over the head restraint.
•
If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Information Provided by:
•
Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Information Provided by:
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Mirrors .............................. 95
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 95
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 95
▫Outside Mirror — Driver Side ............ 96
▫Outside Mirror — Passenger Side .......... 96
▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 97
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 98
▫Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 98
▫Sun Visor Sliding Feature ............... 98
䡵Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped ........... 99
▫Operation ......................... 101
▫Phone Call Features .................. 109
▫Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 112
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 116
▫Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 118
▫General Information .................. 127
䡵Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 127
▫Voice Command System Operation ........ 127
3
Information Provided by:
▫Commands ........................ 129
▫Voice Training ...................... 132
䡵Seats .............................. 132
▫Manual Front Seat Adjustment ........... 133
▫Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped .......................... 134
▫Manual Lumbar — If Equipped .......... 134
▫Driver’s Seatback Recline ............... 135
▫Six-Way Power Seats — If Equipped ....... 136
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 137
▫Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat ........... 138
▫Adjusting Active Head Restraints ......... 139
▫Folding Rear Seat .................... 142
▫Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped ........ 143
䡵To Open And Close The Hood ............ 144
䡵Lights ............................. 146
▫Multifunction Lever .................. 146
▫Headlights And Parking Lights .......... 146
▫Lights-On Reminder .................. 147
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 147
▫Turn Signals ........................ 148
▫High/Low Beam Switch ............... 148
▫Flash-To-Pass ....................... 148
▫Instrument Panel Dimmer .............. 149
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 149
▫Map/Reading Lights .................. 150
䡵Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 151
▫Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 151
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Intermittent Wiper System .............. 152
▫Windshield Washers .................. 152
▫Mist Feature ........................ 153
䡵Tilt Steering Column ................... 154
䡵Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 155
▫To Activate ......................... 155
▫To Set a Desired Speed ................ 156
▫To Deactivate ....................... 156
▫To Resume Speed .................... 156
▫To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 156
▫Manual Transaxle .................... 157
▫To Accelerate For Passing .............. 158
䡵Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 158
▫Programming HomeLink威.............. 160
▫Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 162
▫Using HomeLink威................... 163
▫Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威Button ................... 163
▫Security ........................... 163
▫Troubleshooting Tips .................. 164
▫General Information .................. 164
䡵Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 165
▫Opening The Sunroof ................. 166
▫Closing The Sunroof .................. 166
▫Pinch Protect Feature ................. 166
▫Pinch Protect Override ................ 167
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 167
▫Sunshade Operation .................. 167
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Information Provided by:
▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 167
▫Sunroof Maintenance ................. 167
▫Ignition Off Operation ................. 168
䡵Electrical Power Outlets ................. 168
䡵Power Inverter — If Equipped ............ 170
䡵Cupholders .......................... 172
䡵Storage ............................. 173
▫Glove Compartment And Storage Bin ...... 173
▫Upper Instrument Panel Storage .......... 173
▫Door Storage — If Equipped ............ 174
䡵Chill Zone威Beverage Cooler Storage
Compartment — If Equipped .............. 175
䡵Console Features ...................... 176
䡵Cargo Area Features ................... 178
▫Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight .......................... 178
▫Cargo Cover ........................ 179
▫Removable Load Floor ................ 181
▫Cargo Tie-Down Loops ................ 181
▫Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped ....... 182
䡵Rear Window Features .................. 183
▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer ............ 183
▫Rear Window Defroster ................ 184
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side
of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle with your head close to the door glass.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The control for the power mirrors is located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Power Mirror Control
Mirror Directions
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be extended out to provide more
coverage of the side glass.
Vanity Mirror
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙or ⬙Dial” ѧ“248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Information Provided by:
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
buttons (Uconnect™ Phone button) and
(Voice Command button) that will en-
able you to access the system.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙and ⬙New Entry.⬙Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Information Provided by:
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
the button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a
press of the button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Information Provided by:
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Information Provided by:
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Information Provided by:
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Information Provided by:
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say ⬙Dial⬙or ⬙Call⬙followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Information Provided by:
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
Uconnect™ Phone System to allow use of this vehicle
feature in emergency situations, when the cellular
phone has network coverage and stays paired to the
Uconnect™ Phone System.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
⬙Towing Assistance⬙coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Information Provided by:
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the button and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙is
also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙you
could press the button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙The Uconnect™ Phone will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Information Provided by:
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the button and
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Information Provided by:
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice
Training⬙command.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Information Provided by:
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙(letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙(zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Phone Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Information Provided by:
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Information Provided by:
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Information Provided by:
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command button and say “Help” or “Main
Menu”.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Information Provided by:
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language German”
•
“Language Dutch”
•
“Language Italian”
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seat Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Information Provided by:
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the
driving position.
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat. To increase or decrease support,
rotate the handle up or down.
Seat Height Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Driver’s Seatback Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back
to the desired position and release the handle.
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Reclining Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Information Provided by:
Six-Way Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up,
down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switch
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion
and back. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If High-level heating is selected, the system automatically
switches to Low-level heating and turns one indicator
light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It will
turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after
an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If
Low-level heating is selected, the system automatically
turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 min-
utes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to
the full upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Adjusting Active Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint
should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat Adjusted Head Restraint
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Information Provided by:
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint (on some models, you may need to press the
push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
•
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury
or death in the event of a collision. The head
restraints should always be checked prior to oper-
ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head
restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of an accident and could result in serious injury or
death.
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.
Folding Seat Strap
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch.
Then push the seatback to a reclined position, approxi-
mately 35 degrees maximum, and release the strap.
Rear Seats Folded Flat Reclining Rear Seat Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick
panel.
2. Move the safety catch located under the front edge of
the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Hood Release Lever
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
when standing in front of hood) of the engine compart-
ment, to secure the hood in the open position. Place the
hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood
surface.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Catch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Information Provided by:
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights and fog lights. The multifunction lever
is located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the multifunction lever
to the second detent for headlight operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Control
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate when the
parking lights or the low beam headlight are on. Switch-
ing from low beam to high beam headlights will cause
the fog lights to turn off.
Fog Light Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Information Provided by:
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
turn on the high beam headlights until the multifunction
lever is released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 30 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Turn Signal Control
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
This feature may be performed by either low beam
headlights or by high beam headlights, depending on the
specific regulations of your geographical area. Daytime
Running Lights (DRL), may operate at a lower intensity
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Information Provided by:
than the normal lamp operation. The high beam head-
lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights (DRL),
which is at a lower intensity than the normal high beams.
The DRL’s will come on whenever the ignition is ON, the
engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in
any position except for PARK.
NOTE: The DRLs will automatically turn off when the
turn signals or Hazard Warning flashers are in operation
and automatically turn back on when the turn signals
and Hazard Warning flashers are not operating.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. The lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF
if the door is left open or light is switched on.
Map/Reading Lights
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Fea-
tures” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
Wiper/Washer Control Lever Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Information Provided by:
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever
upward (clockwise) to decrease the delay time and
downward (counterclockwise) to increase the delay time.
The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi-
mately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every
second.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Mist Feature
Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe
to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Mist Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Information Provided by:
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Tilt Steering Control
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control lever is located
on the right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press down on the Elec-
tronic Speed Control lever and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL, normal brak-
ing or pressing the clutch pedal while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing
the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the Electronic
Speed Control lever is tapped, speed increases, so that
tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
reached, and the new set speed will be established.
Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a
1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
Manual Transaxle
Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed con-
trol. A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic
Speed Control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Information Provided by:
To Accelerate for Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed, up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: HomeLink威is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
HomeLink威Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Information Provided by:
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威button you wish to program.
Place the handheld transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away from
the HomeLink威button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威button and the handheld transmitter button
until the HomeLink威indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and handheld transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
After training a HomeLink威channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with program-
ming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Information Provided by:
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威has suc-
cessfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Information Provided by:
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Information Provided by:
Opening the Sunroof
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Express Mode
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, and stop automatically, this is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing the Sunroof
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Again, any release of the switch will
stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partial close condition until the switch is pushed and
held forward again. To ensure sunroof is fully closed,
press and hold switch until sunroof has completely
stopped moving.
Express Mode
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, and stop automatically, this is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove obstruction
and press the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the close position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and hold the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of the sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Information Provided by:
Ignition Off Operation
The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the
ignition has been turned OFF. The sunroof operation will
be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during
the 45 second time period.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located
in the instrument panel for added convenience. This
power outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON
or ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug
into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element,
do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
12 Volt Power Outlet
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR威knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with great caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Information Provided by:
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the
rear of the center console for added convenience. This
outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and
XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually, unplug the device and plug it in again.
NOTE: To avoid overloading the circuit, check the
power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the
inverter.
115 Volt Power Outlet
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with great caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Information Provided by:
CUPHOLDERS
Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are
two cupholders located in the front.
There are two cupholders behind the center console for
rear passengers.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
STORAGE
Glove Compartment And Storage Bin
The glove compartment storage bin is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Upper Instrument Panel Storage
A storage compartment is located in the center of the
instrument panel.
Glove Compartment Storage Bin
Upper Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Information Provided by:
To open the storage compartment, push down on the
button. The lid will open automatically. Push down on
the lid to close it.
Door Storage — If Equipped
The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage
areas.
Opened Storage Compartment Front Door Storage
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CHILL ZONE姞BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE
COMPARTMENT — IF EQUIPPED
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the vehicle. The large glove compartment door swings
downward and features two levels of storage. The upper
bin functions as the Chill Zone威cooled beverage storage
compartment (for vehicles equipped with air condition-
ing) for storing up to four 20 oz (1 L) bottles or cans.
When desired, cool air enters the Chill Zone威to keep the
contents cool, depending on ambient temperature and
A/C settings.
NOTE: The use of the Chill Zone威is for nonperishable
beverages only.
Inside the Chill Zone威is a vent which, when opened,
allows either air conditioned or fresh air to flow into the
Glove Compartment and Chill Zone威
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Information Provided by:
Chill Zone威compartment. Depending on ambient tem-
perature and A/C setting, the compartment can keep
beverages cool.
Vehicles without air conditioning can use that space for
storage. The lower bin holds the Owner’s Manual and
other important documents.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The floor console contains both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
Positioning Slide Control Upper Storage Compartment
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on
the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid
open.
To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on
the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart-
ment and lift the lid open.
Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for
convenience.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Press And Release
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Cargo Cover
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo-
dates the reclining rear seat.
To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover
into one of the two notches located in the rear trim
panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward
on the opposite end and install it into the same notch
location of the rear trim panel.
Three-Press Switch
Rear Trim Notches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Information Provided by:
Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide
the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides
of the rear trim panel.
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Cargo Cover Guides
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area contains a removable load floor.
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are two D-rings installed in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Area
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
Fold-Down Speakers
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the center portion of the control lever. The
control lever is located on the right side of the steering
column.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent position for rear wiper operationa.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
only.
Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first
detent to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the switch
is held. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “park”.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Information Provided by:
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
bottom right-side of the blower control knob.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an addi-
tional five minutes of operation, press the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵Instrument Panel Features ............... 189
䡵Instrument Cluster – Base ............... 190
䡵Instrument Cluster – Premium ............ 191
䡵Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 192
䡵Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped .......................... 206
▫Oil Change Required — If Equipped ...... 208
▫EVIC Functions ..................... 209
▫Compass/Temperature/Audio ........... 210
▫Average Fuel Economy ................ 210
▫Distance To Empty (DTE) .............. 210
▫Elapsed Time ....................... 211
▫Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) ............ 211
▫Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) .......................... 211
䡵Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) .................. 217
▫Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 217
4
Information Provided by:
▫Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 225
▫Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 227
▫List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) .................... 230
▫Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ............................. 230
䡵Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped .................... 232
▫Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped ................. 233
▫Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
— If Equipped ...................... 233
▫Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio ..... 233
▫Clock Setting Procedure —
RER/REN Radio ..................... 235
䡵Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)....... 237
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 237
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 240
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 242
▫Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 245
䡵Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio ...................... 246
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 246
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 252
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 254
▫List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 257
▫Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 257
▫Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped .......................... 258
䡵Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5 — If
Equipped ............................ 262
▫Connecting The iPod威................. 263
▫Using This Feature ................... 264
▫Controlling The iPod威Using
Radio Buttons ....................... 264
▫Play Mode ......................... 264
▫List Or Browse Mode ................. 266
䡵Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
Radios Only) ......................... 268
▫System Activation .................... 268
▫Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 268
▫Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode ............................. 269
▫Satellite Antenna ..................... 269
▫Reception Quality .................... 269
▫Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ............. 270
▫Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 272
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Information Provided by:
▫Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) ....................... 273
䡵Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 273
▫Radio Operation ..................... 274
▫CD Player ......................... 274
䡵CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 274
䡵Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 275
䡵Climate Controls ...................... 275
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ..... 276
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ........................ 280
▫Operating Tips ...................... 285
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 5 — Lower Glove Compartment/Beverage
Cooler – If Equipped 9 — ESC OFF Switch – If Equipped
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Climate Controls 10 — Storage Bins
3 — Radio 7 — Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped 11 — Power Outlet
4 — Passenger Airbag 8 — Hazard Warning Flasher
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized deal-
ership for service.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This indicates that the fuel filler door is located
on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
4. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/kph).
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
6. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Information Provided by:
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
7. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
12. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
13. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
14. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door .............................Door Ajar
gate ..............................Gate Ajar
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
LoW TirE ....................LowTirePressure
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
HOTOIL ...............Engine Oil Temp Too Hot
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the in-
strument cluster, all warnings including “door” and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Information Provided by:
“gATE” and “Oil Change Required” will only be dis-
played in the EVIC display. For additional information,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped”.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
LoW TirE
When tire pressure is low, the odometer display will
toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles.
HOTOIL
When this message is displayed there is a engine over-
temperature condition. When this condition occurs, the
“HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odometer
along with a chime.
Refer to “Engine Oil Overheating” under in “What To Do
In Emergencies”.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
system is ON.
16. Trip/Odometer Display Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (0 km). The odometer must be in Trip mode to
reset.
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Information Provided by:
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
18. Position Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
20. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
23. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Information Provided by:
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
26. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
During sustained high speed driving on hot
days, the automatic transmission oil may be-
come too hot. If this happens, the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light will come on and
the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic trans-
mission cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
Continued operation with the Transmission Tem-
perature Warning Light illuminated could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components causing a fire that may result in
personal injury.
28. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the EVIC messages.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Information Provided by:
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
for further information.
30. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Button — If Equipped
Press the left EVIC button to scroll through sub-menus.
Press and hold the reset button for approximately two
seconds, to reset the display shown.
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
for further information.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Personal settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
Compass heading
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
Uconnect™ Phone displays — If equipped
•
Audio mode display
•
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages.
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – vehicle not in park
(automatic transmission) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmission).
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph/1 km/h)
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph/1 km/h)
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Gate Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Headlamps or Park Lamps On
•
Key In Ignition
•
Check TPM System
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Information Provided by:
•
Oil Change Required
Oil Change Required — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 5 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
EVIC Functions
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func-
tions are displayed on the EVIC:
•
Compass/Temperature/Audio
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
•
Elapsed Time
•
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
•
Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur
if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To
reset all resettable functions, press and release the EVIC
button a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently displayed function (reset ALL will be displayed
during this three-second window).
EVIC Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Information Provided by:
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature, and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)”.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙text and a new DTE value will be dis-
played, based on the current values in the DTE calcula-
tion and the current fuel tank level.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).
Press and release the EVIC button until “Personal Set-
tings” is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, or Francais depending on availability.
As you continue, the displayed information will be
shown in the selected language.
NOTE: Uconnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Information Provided by:
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (auto-
matic transmission). Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second
press to unlock the remaining locked doors. When Re-
mote Unlock All Doors is selected, all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until “Driver’s Door 1st” or “All Doors” appears
to make your selection.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. Press and hold the EVIC
button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears
to make your selection.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone, power sunroof, and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a
vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “OFF”, “45 sec.”,
“5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “OFF”, “30 sec.”,
“60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make your selection.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
Uconnect™ system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF”
appears to make your selection.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “OFF”, “30 sec.”,
“60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make your selection.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the EVIC
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Information Provided by:
Display Units In
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps system units
can be changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears to make your
selection.
Automatic Compass Calibration
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by com-
pleting one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-
racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
To Set the Variance: with the ignition in the ON position,
with a short button press (less than one second) press and
release the EVIC button several times until you have
displayed the “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” menu. Once in the “Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” menu,
press and release (less than one second) the EVIC button
several times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted.
The “Compass Variance” message and the current vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. To change the zone,
press and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC
button to increment the variance one step. Repeat as
necessary, with individual long (for at least one second)
EVIC button presses for each increment, until the desired
variance is achieved. To exit the Variance Programming,
press the EVIC button with a short (less than one second)
button press.
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During program-
ming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Information Provided by:
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
2. Using a quick button press (less than one second),
press and release the EVIC button several times until the
EVIC displays the “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” menu.
3. Once in the “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” menu, press and release (less
than one second) the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed.
4. Using a long button press (more than one second)
press the EVIC button, this will place the Compass in
calibration mode. The CAL indicator will come on con-
tinuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the com-
pass is now in the calibration mode, and that the vehicle
can now be driven to calibrate.
5. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circle under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A short EVIC button press from the ⬙Calibrate
Compass (Yes)⬙screen will exit the EVIC Customer-
Programmable Features, and return it to its normal
operating mode.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Information Provided by:
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Information Provided by:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Information Provided by:
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Information Provided by:
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Information Provided by:
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
For Uconnect™ “Voice Command,” refer to “Uconnect™
Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Information Provided by:
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
To Manually Set the Clock
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Information Provided by:
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
Uconnect威gps — RER Only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Information Provided by:
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Media Center 130 (RES)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Information Provided by:
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Information Provided by:
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Information Provided by:
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Information Provided by:
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Information Provided by:
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Information Provided by:
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Information Provided by:
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type
or undefined None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Information Provided by:
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Information Provided by:
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Information Provided by:
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Information Provided by:
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Information Provided by:
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Information Provided by:
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,
RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if
equipped as an option with these radios.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
This feature allows an iPod威to be plugged into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威and
iPhone威devices. Some iPod威software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
•
Connecting an iPod威to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPod威is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system (iPod威may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPod威starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
•
It may be necessary to remove the connector pin
protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to
connecting the cable.
•
If the iPod威battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Information Provided by:
Using This Feature
By using the provided connection cable to connect an
iPod威to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
•
The iPod威audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The iPod威can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威contents.
•
The iPod威battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威device)
Controlling The iPod姞Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威and display
data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the
list.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK
>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Information Provided by:
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威.IftheRND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
iPod威.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticed.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-
menu list item on the iPod威then follow the same steps
to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威(or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Information Provided by:
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Information Provided by:
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Information Provided by:
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Information Provided by:
The button located in the center of the right-hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next
listenable station. Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK
down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons.
CD Player
Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on
the CD. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the
beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the
previous track, if it is within one second after the current
track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Information Provided by:
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are four blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Information Provided by:
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning System is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer tem-
peratures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Information Provided by:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Automatic Operation
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the sys-
tem will maintain that level automati-
cally using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
Automatic Temperature Control
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
NOTE:
•
The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
•
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation turn the
knob to AUTO position. In manual
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will shut off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Information Provided by:
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Information Provided by:
•
Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•
Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will put the system in recircu-
lation mode. This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
the control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then
press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Information Provided by:
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵Starting Procedures .................... 293
▫Manual Transmission – If Equipped ....... 293
▫Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ..... 293
▫Normal Starting ..................... 293
▫Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) ............................ 294
▫If Engine Fails To Start ................ 294
▫After Starting ....................... 295
䡵Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 295
䡵Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........ 296
▫Five–Speed Manual Transmission ......... 296
▫Recommended Shift Speeds ............. 297
▫Downshifting ....................... 297
䡵Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 298
▫Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 299
▫Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System ............................ 300
▫Gear Ranges ........................ 300
5
Information Provided by:
䡵AutoStick威— If Equipped ............... 302
▫Operation ......................... 302
▫General Information .................. 303
䡵Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 304
▫Acceleration ........................ 304
▫Traction ........................... 304
䡵Driving Through Water ................. 305
▫Flowing/Rising Water ................. 305
▫Shallow Standing Water ............... 305
䡵Power Steering ....................... 307
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 307
䡵Parking Brake ........................ 308
䡵Brake System ........................ 310
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 311
䡵Electronic Brake Control System ........... 314
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 314
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 314
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 315
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual
Transmission Only ................... 316
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 318
䡵Tire Safety Information ................. 321
▫Tire Markings ....................... 321
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 324
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 325
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 326
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
䡵Tires — General Information ............. 330
▫Tire Pressure ....................... 330
▫Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 331
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 333
▫Radial Ply Tires ..................... 333
▫Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 333
▫Tire Spinning ....................... 334
▫Tread Wear Indicators ................. 335
▫Life Of Tire ........................ 336
▫Replacement Tires .................... 336
䡵Tire Chains .......................... 338
䡵Snow Tires .......................... 338
䡵Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 338
䡵Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..... 339
▫Base System ........................ 342
▫Premium System – If Equipped .......... 344
▫General Information .................. 348
䡵Fuel Requirements ..................... 348
▫Reformulated Gasoline ................ 349
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 349
▫E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 350
▫MMT In Gasoline .................... 350
▫Materials Added To Fuel ............... 351
▫Fuel System Cautions ................. 351
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 352
䡵Adding Fuel ......................... 353
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Information Provided by:
▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 353
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 355
䡵Vehicle Loading ...................... 355
▫Vehicle Certification Label .............. 355
䡵Trailer Towing ........................ 357
▫Common Towing Definitions ............ 357
▫Installing A Trailer Hitch ............... 360
▫Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 360
▫Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ..................... 361
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 362
▫Towing Requirements ................. 363
▫Towing Tips ........................ 368
䡵Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 369
▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ........................... 369
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
•
The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
•
If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is
locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
key.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Information Provided by:
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies” for further information.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to
the START position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it
will disengage automatically when the engine is running.
If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key
in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Information Provided by:
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five–Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal. Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
Shift Pattern
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission
lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher
shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the
transmission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
Engine
Size
Accel-
eration
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
All En-
gines
Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Information Provided by:
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be
overburdened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis-
sion (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This
may sometimes ⬙feel⬙as if it is slipping, but this is normal
and does not harm anything.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
Automatic transmission vehicles are equipped with a
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that
holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must
be turned to the ON or START position (engine running
or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transmission will
not shift out of PARK. Battery power is required to
release the brake/transmission interlock system. There is
a removable plug in the right side of the shifter housing
that allows you to insert your finger to override the
system. If this occurs, obtain service as soon as possible.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ON position, and the brake
pedal is pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, and then place the
shift lever in the PARK position.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the
key from the ignition, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition,
the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
children inside a vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the
ignition key in the ignition switch. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward until it stops.
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the shifter bezel
to ensure it is in the PARK position.
•
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of the PARK position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering
wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, dam-
age to the steering column or shift lever could result.
You must also press the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
DRIVE
This range is used for most city and highway driving.
AUTOSTICK姞— IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more
control. AutoStick威allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations. Automatic
ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission (CVT)
and/or the engine from overspeed. Changes down will
only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stall-
ing.
Operation
NOTE: AutoStick威is not functional until the CVT
warms up in cold weather.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
AutoStick威operation is activated in the DRIVE position
by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Moving the shift
lever to the (+) side will activate AutoStick威and shift up
to the next higher manual ratio, unless you are already
operating in or near Overdrive, in which case sixth gear
ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving the shift
lever to (-) will activate AutoStick威and shift to the next
lower manual ratio. After AutoStick威is activated, the
manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission
ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the (+) or (-)
direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio.
AutoStick威is deactivated:
•
By holding the shift lever to (+) momentarily
•
When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE
•
When in sixth position, touching the shift lever to the
right
•
When heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) applica-
tion is detected
General Information
•
If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will
automatically select the first gear ratio.
•
If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transmission will automatically select
the next higher ratio.
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
However. the CVT will stay in the manually selected
ratio.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Information Provided by:
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Information Provided by:
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key in the ignition switch. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will light.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on
is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking per-
formance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The “ABS Warning Light” monitors the ABS
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as
possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may also experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock mode:
•
the ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves
•
brake pedal pulsations
•
a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophis-
ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This in-
terference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock brak-
ing capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All sys-
tems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Information Provided by:
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission
Only
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped.
•
Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal.
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times within
20 seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several
times to confirm HSA is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Information Provided by:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition.
•
Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC Off Indicator Light
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
(Continued)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESC Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Information Provided by:
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. This mode is intended to be used if the
vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and
more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is
required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Information Provided by:
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C,D,E= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Information Provided by:
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Information Provided by:
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Information Provided by:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in tire over-heating and failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h).
•
Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
•
Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Information Provided by:
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Information Provided by:
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following
diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
“cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Information Provided by:
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Information Provided by:
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Information Provided by:
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In
addition, the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
Low Tire Pressure Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Information Provided by:
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin-
guish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been re-
ceived. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM” message for three seconds. This text message is
then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of
the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
Check TPM System Display
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure values.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM” message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure values.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Information Provided by:
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high-quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Information Provided by:
E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold driveability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT have been
shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission
system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends using gasoline without MMT. Since the
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or
not their gasoline contains MMT.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
It is even more important to look for gasoline without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of Methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period of time. If
the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short period,
adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, out-
side air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
Fuel Filler Door
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could
let impurities into the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and Federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that cap is properly tight-
ened.
•
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and press the odometer/trip odometer RESET
button to turn the message off. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Information Provided by:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Information Provided by:
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certi-
fication Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s direc-
tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control and thereby en-
hancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds, contributing positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on Vehicle and Trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Information Provided by:
Installing A Trailer Hitch
NOTE: If you install a trailer hitch after you purchase
the vehicle, you must install a MOPAR威or equivalent
spare tire hold down kit. The kit will allow you to
properly secure the spare tire and jack assembly.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle without a properly se-
cured tire and jack assembly. Any loose items may be
thrown forward in a collision or hard stop and strike
occupants, causing serious or fatal injury.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man with
Trailer Tow Prep
Package (AHC)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Information Provided by:
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely from side-to-side which will cause loss of con-
trol of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steer-
ing, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmis-
sion, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Al-
ways block or ⴖchockⴖthe trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
(Continued)
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(this requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Information Provided by:
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Information Provided by:
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage it
until you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase the engine idle
speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Recreational
Towing Condi-
tion
Manual Trans-
mission Ve-
hicles
Automatic
Transmission
Vehicles
Four Wheel Flat
Tow (All Wheels
on Ground)
Yes Never
Two Wheel
Dolly Tow (Front
or Rear Wheels
on Ground)
Never Never
Flat Bed Tow
(All Wheels on
Bed of Truck)
Yes Yes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC
position.
CAUTION!
•
Do not flat tow any vehicle equipped with a
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all four wheels are off the ground.
•
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 372
䡵If Your Engine Overheats ................ 372
䡵Automatic Transaxle Overheating .......... 373
䡵Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 374
▫Jack Location ....................... 374
▫Spare Tire Stowage ................... 374
▫Preparations For Jacking ............... 375
▫Jacking Instructions ................... 376
䡵Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 380
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 381
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 383
䡵Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 385
䡵Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 386
▫With Ignition Key .................... 386
▫Without The Ignition Key .............. 387
6
Information Provided by:
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transaxle oil may
become too hot.
If this happens, the transmission overheat in-
dicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373
Information Provided by:
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375
Information Provided by:
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377
Information Provided by:
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear
jacking locations on each side of the body. The front
locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear
ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped
with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose
the jacking locations in the body.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, prop-
erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
Information Provided by:
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access
the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two
finger screws, located on the radiator support.
Air Intake Finger Screws
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and 1st gear. Using minimal accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spin-
ning the wheels, is most effective.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol or Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system
OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
Information Provided by:
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Automatic Transaxle
•
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with
the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels off the ground).
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles must be towed on a
flatbed truck (all four wheels off the ground).
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Manual Transaxle
•
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
•
FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels
elevated.
•
FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck
(all wheels off the ground).
All Transaxles
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not
in the LOCK position.
•
Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system (automatic transmission
only). There is a removable plug in the right side of the
shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to
override the system. The ignition key must be in the ON
position to use the override lever.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Engine Compartment — 2.0L ............. 391
䡵Engine Compartment — 2.4L ............. 392
䡵Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 393
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 393
䡵Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 394
䡵Replacement Parts ..................... 395
䡵Dealer Service ........................ 395
䡵Maintenance Procedures ................. 396
▫Engine Oil ......................... 397
▫Engine Oil Filter ..................... 400
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 400
▫Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 401
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 402
▫Body Lubrication .................... 403
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 404
▫Adding Washer Fluid ................. 404
▫Exhaust System ..................... 405
7
Information Provided by:
▫Cooling System ..................... 407
▫Brake System ....................... 413
▫Automatic Transmission (CVT) –
If Equipped ........................ 416
▫Manual Transmission – If Equipped ....... 417
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 417
䡵Fuses .............................. 423
▫Integrated Power Module (IPM) .......... 423
䡵Vehicle Storage ....................... 427
䡵Replacement Bulbs .................... 427
䡵Bulb Replacement ..................... 427
▫Front Headlamps, Parking, And Turn Signal
Lamps ............................ 427
▫Fog Lamps ......................... 428
▫Rear Tail, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps . . 429
▫License Lamps ...................... 431
▫Center High-Mounted Stoplamp ......... 432
䡵Fluid Capacities ...................... 433
䡵Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 434
▫Engine ............................ 434
▫Chassis ........................... 435
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Integrated Power Module
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery (Under Cover)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Battery (Under Cover)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Integrated Power Module 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a⬙clicking⬙sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
Information Provided by:
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
Information Provided by:
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The range markings will consist of a crosshatch
zone that says SAFE or a crosshatch zone that says MIN
at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of
the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil
level at the full end of the indicator range.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as
indicated by the range markings, as described above,
on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration,
which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase
in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Information Provided by:
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Information Provided by:
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment (right rear side), and the fluid level
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant
(antifreeze).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
Information Provided by:
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro-
tection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
Information Provided by:
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines
shown on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant
(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
Information Provided by:
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
recovery bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
Information Provided by:
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
Information Provided by:
Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid which has been formulated with special
metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the
proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid will cause belt slip
and result in a complete transmission failure!
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked only by a trained technician.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Special Additives
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
(CVTF+4威). CVTF+4威is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
Information Provided by:
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes of corrosion are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
Information Provided by:
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR威Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR威cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheels’ protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a high quality cleaner, to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Information Provided by:
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the
car to wash them.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft cloth.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This
center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label
that identifies each component may be printed on the
inside of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 Empty Empty
2 15 Amp
Lt Blue
AWD/4WD ECU
Feed
Integrated Power Module 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
3 10 Amp
Red
CHMSL Brake Switch
Feed
4 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch Feed/
OCM
5 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
6 10 Amp
Red
IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/
Steering Cntrl Sdar/
Hands-Free Phone –
If Equipped
7 30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense1
8 30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense2
9 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats – If
Equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
10 20 Amp
Yellow
CCN Power Locks/
Interior Lighting
11 15 Amp
Lt Blue
Power Outlet
12 20 Amp
Yellow
Ign Run/Acc Inverter
13 20 Amp
Yellow
Pwr Run/Acc Outlet
RR/Dome Lamp/
Cigar Lighter
14 10 Amp
Red
IOD CCN
15 40 Amp
Green
RAD Fan Relay Bat-
tery Feed
16 15 Amp
Lt Blue
IGN Run/Acc Dome
Lamp/Sunroof/Rear
Wiper Motor/ACC
Inverter
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
17 10 Amp
Red
IOD Feed Mod-Wcm
18 40 Amp
Green
ASD Relay Contact
PWR Feed
19 20 Amp
Yellow
PWR Amp 1 & Amp
2 Feed
20 15 Amp
Lt Blue
IOD Feed Radio
21 10 Amp
Red
IOD Feed Intrus
Mod/Siren – If
Equipped
22 10 Amp
Red
IGN RUN Heat/AC/
Compass Sensor
23 15 Amp
Lt Blue
ENG ASD Relay Feed
3
24 15 Amp
Lt Blue
Power Sunroof Feed –
If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
25 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirror – If
Equipped
26 15 Amp
Lt Blue
ENG ASD Relay Feed
2
27 10 Amp
Red
IGN RUN Only ORC
Feed
28 10 Amp
Red
IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Feed
29 Hot Car (No Fuse Re-
quired)
30 20 Amp
Yellow
Heated Seat – If
Equipped
31 10 Amp
Red
Headlamp Washer
Relay Control – If
Equipped
32 30 Amp
Pink
ENG ASD Control
Feed 1
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
33 10 Amp
Red
ABS MOD/J1962
Conn/PCM
34 30 Amp
Pink
ABS Valve Feed
35 40 Amp
Green
ABS Pump Feed
36 30 Amp
Pink
Headlamp/Washer
Control/Smart Glass
– If Equipped
37 25 Amp
Natural
Diesel Fuel Heater –
If Equipped
CAUTION!
•
When installing the IPM cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
•
Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb Number
Front Header Lamp ......................T578
Center Dome Lamp ...................... T578
Rear Cargo/Flashlight ................. 8–A35LF
LIGHTS BULBS – Exterior Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamp ............ H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Lamp ......................PSX24W
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) ......................LEDAssembly
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp .....................3157
Rear Turn Signal Lamp .................3757AK
Backup Lamp ......................921W16W
License Lamp.......................... W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Front Headlamps, Parking, and Turn Signal
Lamps
NOTE: The headlamp bulb can be accessed from under
the hood without the removal of the inner fender well. It
will be necessary to remove the inner fender well to
service the park/turn signal bulb that is located toward
the outboard side of the head lamp unit.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Information Provided by:
1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
2. Working in the appropriate wheel well, loosen the
front of the splash shield, but do not fully remove it.
3. Looking up through the front wheel well, locate the
bulb which needs replacing. The headlamp bulb is the
inboard bulb and the park/turn signal bulb is the out-
board bulb.
4. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.
5. Grasp the bulb, twist 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
pull straight out of front lamp unit.
Fog Lamps
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire on the same side of
the vehicle as the fog lamp being serviced. Refer to
“Jacking and Tire Changing” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies” for further information.
3. Remove the three screws that secure the outboard side
of the front wheel house splash shield to the front fascia.
4. Remove the push pin fastener that secures the inboard
side of the splash shield to the front end sheet metal.
5. Remove the two push pin fasteners that secure the
forward edge of the splash shield to the front fascia
closure panel.
6. Fold the front of the splash shield rearward far enough
to access the back of the front fascia.
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
7. From behind the front fascia disconnect the engine
compartment wire harness connector from the front fog
lamp bulb connector receptacle.
8. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
9. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
Rear Tail, Turn Signal, and Backup Lamps
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Information Provided by:
2. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the
lamp from the aperture panel.
NOTE: It is not necessary to completely remove the tail
lamp unit. Once loosened from the quarter panel, there
should be enough room to service any of the bulbs.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
4. Twist and remove socket from the lamp.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
5. Remove the bulb from the socket and replace.
License Lamps
1. Using a trim stick or equivalent, gently pry on the side
of the license plate lamp to release it from the liftgate.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Information Provided by:
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise and re-
move from the lamp.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
The lamp is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.6 Gallons 51.5 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR威Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Information Provided by:
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If
Equipped
MOPAR威CVTF + 4威
Manual Transmission – If Equipped MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威product.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威product.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵Emissions Control System Maintenance ...... 438
䡵Maintenance Schedule .................. 438
▫Required Maintenance Intervals .......... 440
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Information Provided by:
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation condition, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate; this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change
and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439
Information Provided by:
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
•
Check the manual transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441
Information Provided by:
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs.
❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443
Information Provided by:
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445
Information Provided by:
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447
Information Provided by:
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs.
❏Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. †
❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449
Information Provided by:
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451
Information Provided by:
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs.
❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 457
▫Prepare For The Appointment ........... 457
▫Prepare A List ...................... 457
▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 457
䡵If You Need Assistance ................. 457
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 458
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 458
▫In Mexico Contact .................... 458
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 459
▫Service Contract ..................... 459
䡵Warranty Information .................. 460
䡵MOPAR威Parts ....................... 460
䡵Reporting Safety Defects ................ 460
▫In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 460
▫In Canada ......................... 461
9
Information Provided by:
䡵Publication Order Forms ................ 461
䡵Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 462
▫Treadwear ......................... 463
▫Traction Grades ..................... 463
▫Temperature Grades .................. 463
456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457
Information Provided by:
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423–6343
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-485-
2001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459
Information Provided by:
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞PARTS
MOPAR威fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461
Information Provided by:
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463
Information Provided by:
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
INDEX
10
Information Provided by:
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ..............311
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 409
Adding Fuel ...........................353
Adding Washer Fluid ..................... 404
Additives, Fuel .........................351
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 400
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............402
Air Conditioning ........................276
Air Conditioning Controls .................276
Air Conditioning Filter .................... 286
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............287
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............402,403
Air Conditioning System .............276,280,402
Air Pressure, Tires .......................331
Airbag ..............................57,68
Airbag Deployment ....................... 69
Airbag Light .....................66,71,87,194
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 70
Airbag, Side ......................60,64,67,68
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........61,64,68
Alarm Light ...........................201
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ................259,269
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 408,433,434
Capacities ...........................433
Disposal ............................411
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............311
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................204
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 17
Appearance Care ........................417
Assistance Towing .......................113
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................95
Automatic Door Locks ................... 29,30
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 280
Automatic Transaxle ...........12,293,298,373,416
Fluid Level Check .....................416
Interlock System .......................300
466 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Overheating ..........................373
Selection Of Lubricant ...................416
Shifting .............................300
Special Additives ......................416
Autostick .............................302
Battery ...............................401
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......24
Belts, Seat .............................. 87
Beverage Cooler ........................175
Body Mechanism Lubrication ............... 403
B-Pillar Location ........................ 326
Brake Assist System ......................314
Brake Fluid ............................ 435
Brake, Parking ..........................308
Brake System ........................310,413
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................311,314
Master Cylinder .......................413
Parking .............................308
Warning Light ........................195
Brakes .............................310,413
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............299
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........84
Bulb Replacement ....................... 427
Bulbs, Light ..........................89,427
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........ 433
Capacities, Fluid ........................ 433
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................353
Oil (Engine) ....................... 392,399
Power Steering ........................307
Car Washes ............................418
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 86,352
Cargo Area Cover .......................179
Cargo Area Features ...................... 178
Cargo Compartment
Light ...............................178
10
INDEX 467
Information Provided by:
Cargo Light ............................ 178
Cargo Load Floor ........................181
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................181
Cellular Phone ........................99,275
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 432
Chains, Tire ............................ 338
Changing A Flat Tire .....................374
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................322
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............203,394
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............85
Checks, Safety ........................... 85
Child Restraint .......................... 74
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ...............78
Child Safety Locks ........................31
Child Seat ..............................80
Clean Air Gasoline .......................349
Cleaning
Wheels .............................420
Climate Control .........................275
Clock .....................218,233,235,238,247
Clutch ...............................413
Clutch Fluid ........................... 413
Coin Holder ...........................176
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ............. 274
Compact Spare Tire ...................... 333
Connector
UCI ................................262
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ......... 262
Console ..............................176
Contract, Service ........................459
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................433,434
Cooler, Beverage ........................ 175
Cooling System ......................... 407
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 409
Coolant Level ...................... 408,411
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 411
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................408
468 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Inspection ...........................411
Points to Remember .................410,412
Pressure Cap .........................410
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........408
Corrosion Protection .....................417
Cruise Light ........................... 199
Cupholders ............................176
Customer Assistance ..................... 457
Dealer Service ..........................395
Defroster, Rear Window ...................184
Defroster, Windshield ................87,278,283
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 152
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................393
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................148
Dipsticks
Power Steering ........................307
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............... 411
Engine Oil ........................... 399
Door Locks ............................. 27
Door Locks, Automatic ....................29
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 158
Downshifting ..........................297
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .................... 135
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ...................304
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 305
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 97
Electrical Power Outlets ...................168
Electronic Brake Control System ............. 314
Anti-Lock Brake System ................. 314
Brake Assist System ....................314
Electronic Stability Program ...............318
Traction Control System .................315
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......155
10
INDEX 469
Information Provided by:
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............ 318
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....206
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking .............................374
Jump Starting .........................380
Towing ............................. 386
Emission Control System Maintenance ......394,438
Engine ...............................392
Block Heater .........................295
Break-In Recommendations ................84
Checking Oil Level .....................397
Cooling .............................407
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 86,352
Fuel Requirements .....................348
Jump Starting .........................380
Oil ...........................397,433,434
Oil Change Interval ....................398
Oil Filler Cap ...................... 392,399
Oil Filter ............................ 434
Oil Selection .......................... 398
Oil Synthetic ......................... 399
Overheating ..........................372
Temperature Gauge ....................192
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 68
Exhaust Gas Caution .................36,86,352
Exhaust System .......................86,405
Exterior Lights ..........................89
Filler Location Fuel ......................193
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................400
Air Conditioning ...................... 286
Engine Oil ........................400,434
Flashers ..............................372
Hazard Warning ....................... 372
Turn Signal ...................... 89,200,429
Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 380
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 294
470 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Fluid, Brake ...........................435
Fluid Capacities ......................... 433
Fluid Leaks .............................89
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle .................... 416
Power Steering ........................307
Fluids ................................434
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 434
Fog Lights ....................... 147,201,428
Folding Rear Seat ........................142
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) ..................142
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 385
Front Position Light ......................427
Fuel ..............................348,434
Adding .............................353
Additives ............................351
Capacity ............................433
Clean Air ............................349
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................193,353
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ................... 193
Gasoline ............................348
Gauge ..............................193
Light ...............................193
Octane Rating ........................ 348
Requirements .........................348
Tank Capacity ........................ 433
Fuel System Caution .....................354
Fueling ...............................353
Fuses ................................423
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........158
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 353,355,393
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................349
Gasoline (Fuel) ....................... 348,433
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................349
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................192
Fuel ...............................193
10
INDEX 471
Information Provided by:
Odometer ...........................197
Tachometer .......................... 196
Gearshift ..............................300
General Information ................. 17,127,348
General Maintenance ..................... 396
Glass Cleaning .......................... 421
Glove Compartment ......................175
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................. 358
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............356,357
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) ..............99
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Shallow Standing Water ................. 305
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................372
Head Restraints ......................... 139
Headlights ............................427
Cleaning ............................421
High Beam ..........................148
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........148
Passing .............................148
Replacing ...........................427
Switch ..............................146
Heated Mirrors .......................... 98
Heated Seats ...........................137
Heater ...............................276
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 295
Hill Start Assist ......................... 316
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................360
HomeLink威(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 158
Hood Release ..........................144
Ignition ...............................12
Key ................................12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 14
Infant Restraint .......................... 75
472 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 206
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 95
Instrument Cluster .................... 190,192
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 189
Instrument Panel Cover ...................422
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............422
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 423
Interior Appearance Care ..................420
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ........... 152
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ...........................374
Jack Operation ....................... 374,376
Jacking Instructions ...................... 376
Jump Starting ..........................380
Key, Programming ........................16
Key, Replacement ........................15
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 14
Key-In Reminder ......................... 14
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................18
Keys .................................12
Lane Change and Turn Signals .............. 429
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 39
Latches ................................89
Hood ..............................144
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 348
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 89
Life of Tires ............................336
Liftgate (Sedan) ..........................35
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .............183
Light Bulbs ..........................89,427
Lights ..............................89,146
Airbag ........................66,71,87,194
Alarm ..............................201
Anti-Lock ...........................204
Back-Up ............................429
10
INDEX 473
Information Provided by:
Brake Warning ........................ 195
Bulb Replacement ......................427
Cargo .............................. 178
Center Mounted Stop ................... 432
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............... 146
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 318
Engine Temperature Warning .............. 194
Exterior ..............................89
Fog ..........................147,201,428
Headlight Switch ......................146
Headlights ...........................146
High Beam Indicator .................... 205
Instrument Cluster .....................146
License .............................431
Lights On Reminder ....................147
Low Fuel ............................ 193
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 203
Map Reading ......................... 150
Oil Pressure ..........................194
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 194
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............18,201
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 203
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .............. 201
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........201
Traction Control ....................... 318
Turn Signal ...................89,146,148,429
Voltage ............................. 193
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 192
Loading Vehicle ......................355,357
Capacities ...........................357
Tires ...............................326
Locks
Child Protection ........................31
Door ................................27
Power Door ...........................28
Lubrication, Body .......................403
Lumbar Support ........................134
474 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 401
Maintenance, General ..................... 396
Maintenance Procedures ................... 396
Maintenance Schedule .................... 438
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 203,394
Manual, Service .........................461
Manual Transaxle ..................293,296,417
Downshifting .........................297
Fluid Level Check .....................417
Frequency of Fluid Change ...............417
Lubricant Selection .....................417
Map/Reading Lights .....................150
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................413
Mirrors ................................95
Automatic Dimming .....................95
Electric Powered .......................97
Heated ..............................98
Outside ..............................96
Rearview .............................95
Vanity ............................... 98
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ............... 339
Mopar Parts ......................... 395,460
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 146
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 84
Occupant Restraints ..................... 64,69
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ......... 37,60,61,64,68
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............348
Odometer .............................197
Trip ............................. 197,199
Oil Change Indicator ..................... 198
Oil, Engine ......................... 397,433
Capacity ............................433
Change Interval ....................... 398
Checking ............................397
Disposal ............................399
10
INDEX 475
Information Provided by:
Filter ...............................400
Identification Logo ..................... 398
Materials Added to .....................399
Recommendation ...................398,433
Synthetic ............................399
Viscosity ............................ 399
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............393,394
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........158
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Overdrive .............................302
Overheating, Engine ...................192,372
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,461
Paint Care .............................417
Panic Alarm ............................22
Parking Brake .......................... 308
Passing Light ...........................148
Personal Settings ........................ 211
Pets ..................................84
Phone, Cellular ..........................99
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) ..............99
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 326
Power
Door Locks ........................... 28
Mirrors ..............................97
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........168
Steering .............................307
Sunroof .............................165
Windows ............................. 33
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 435
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............56
Preparation for Jacking .................... 375
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................50
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 211
Radial Ply Tires .........................333
Radio Operation ........................ 275
476 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威studios) ...........268
Rear Fog Lights .........................429
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ...................... 35
Rear Seat, Folding .......................142
Rear Window Defroster ...................184
Rear Window Features .................... 183
Rear Wiper/Washer ......................183
Recreational Towing ...................... 369
Refrigerant ............................403
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................55
Remote Control
Door Locks ........................... 18
Security Alarm .........................17
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ...............18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........273
Remote Starting System .................... 25
Replacement Bulbs .......................427
Replacement Keys ........................ 15
Replacement Parts ....................... 395
Replacement Tires .......................336
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 460
Resetting Oil Change Indicator .............. 198
Restraint, Head .........................139
Restraints, Child .......................74,80
Restraints, Infant .........................75
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ...............179
Rotation, Tires .......................... 338
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................87
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 89
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 460
Safety, Exhaust Gas ....................... 86
Safety Information, Tire ................... 321
Safety Tips .............................85
Satellite Radio Antenna ................. 259,269
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威studios) ...........268
Schedule, Maintenance ....................438
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 422
10
INDEX 477
Information Provided by:
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 55
Seat Belts .............................. 87
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .................. 44
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 44
And Pregnant Women ...................56
Child Restraint ........................74
Front Seat ............................ 39
Inspection ............................87
Pretensioners ..........................50
Rear Seat .............................39
Seat Belts (Sedan) ........................37
Seats .................................132
Adjustment ..........................133
Heated .............................137
Lumbar Support ....................... 134
Rear Folding ......................... 142
Rear Folding (Sedan) ................... 142
Seatback Release ....................... 135
Tilting .............................. 135
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................17
Selection of Oil ......................... 398
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 14
Sentry Key Programming ................... 16
Sentry Key Replacement ...................15
Service Assistance .......................457
Service Contract .........................459
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................203
Service Manuals ........................ 461
Setting the Clock .............218,233,235,238,247
Settings, Personal ........................ 211
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle .............. 297
Shoulder Belts ........................... 39
Side Airbag .............................67
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ..........286
Signals, Turn ...................... 89,200,429
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............... 304
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................338
478 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Snow Tires ............................ 338
Spare Tire .......................... 333,374
Specifications
Oil ................................398
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........... 155,199
Speedometer ...........................193
Speedometer and Odometer ................ 190
Starting ...............................293
Automatic Transmission .................293
Engine Fails to Start ....................294
Manual Transmission ................... 293
Remote ..............................25
Starting Procedures ...................... 293
Steering
Power ..............................307
Tilt Column ..........................154
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . 273
Storage ...............................427
Storage Bin ............................173
Storage, Vehicle .........................285
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 385
Sun Roof .............................. 165
Sun Visor Extension .......................98
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 57
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 399
System, Remote Starting .................... 25
Tachometer ............................ 196
Taillights .............................. 429
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 280
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......192,373
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............78
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................17
Theft System (Security Alarm) ............... 17
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................... 181
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 154
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......... 326
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............324
10
INDEX 479
Information Provided by:
Tire Markings .......................... 321
Tire Safety Information ....................321
Tires ............................89,330,462
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................336
Air Pressure ..........................330
Chains ..............................338
Changing ............................374
Compact Spare ........................ 333
Flat Changing ........................380
General Information ....................330
High Speed ..........................333
Inflation Pressures ..................... 331
Jacking .............................374
Life of Tires ..........................336
Load Capacity ..................... 326,327
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........339
Pressure Warning Light .................. 201
Quality Grading ....................... 462
Radial ..............................333
Replacement .........................336
Rotation ............................338
Safety ...........................321,330
Sizes ...............................322
Snow Tires ........................... 338
Spare Tire ...........................374
Spinning ............................334
Tread Wear Indicators ...................335
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 362
Towing ............................... 357
24-Hour Towing Assistance ............... 113
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 386
Guide ..............................361
Recreational ..........................369
Weight .............................. 361
Towing Assistance .......................113
Traction .............................. 304
Trailer Towing .......................... 357
Cooling System Tips .................... 369
480 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Hitches .............................360
Minimum Requirements ................. 363
Trailer and Tongue Weight ............... 362
Wiring .............................. 367
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 361
Trailer Weight .......................... 361
Transaxle ............................. 298
Automatic ....................12,293,298,416
Autostick ............................302
Manual ..........................293,296
Operation ...........................298
Overdrive ...........................302
Selection of Lubricant ...................416
Transmission
Range Indicator ....................... 197
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 158
Transporting Pets ........................84
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 335
Trip Odometer .......................... 197
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................ 199
Turn Signals ...................... 148,200,429
UCI Connector ......................... 262
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ..............99
Understanding Your Instrument Panel .........189
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................462
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 262
Universal Transmitter ..................... 158
Unleaded Gasoline .......................348
Vanity Mirrors ........................... 98
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 355
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................327,355,357
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage ....................... 285,427
10
INDEX 481
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........17
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............127
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............192
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................460
Washer, Adding Fluid .....................404
Washers, Windshield .....................152
Washing Vehicle ......................... 418
Water
Driving Through ......................305
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................420
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................ 420
Wind Buffeting .........................167
Window Fogging ........................286
Windows .............................. 33
Power ...............................33
Windshield Defroster ................87,278,283
Windshield Washers ...................151,152
Windshield Wipers ....................151,404
Wipers, Intermittent ......................152
482 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Chrysler Group LLC
10PM491-126-AC 3rd Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Information Provided by:

Navigation menu